blob: 464793629e7c9196fdb30ffae8b047892034def8 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000021#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000024#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000030#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000032#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000033#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000034#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000035#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +000037#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
41#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
43#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000044#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
45#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000046#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
48#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
49#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
50#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000051#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000052#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000053#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000054#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
56#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
Robert Loughercf176742016-12-15 16:17:53 +000057#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000058#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000059#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000060#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000061#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
62#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000063#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000064#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000065#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000066#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000067#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000068#include <cassert>
69#include <climits>
70#include <cstddef>
71#include <cstdint>
72#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000073#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000074#include <set>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000075#include <utility>
76#include <vector>
77
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000078using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000079using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000080
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000081#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
82
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000083// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
84// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
85// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
86// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000087static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
88 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
89 cl::desc(
90 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
91
92static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
93 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
94 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000095
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000096static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000097 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
98 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000099
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000100static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
101 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
102 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000103
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000104static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
105 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
106 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
107 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
108 "predicated store"));
109
110static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
111 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
112 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
113 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
114
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000115static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
116 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
117 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
118 "executed"));
119
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000120static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
121 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
122 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
123 "speculatively executed instructions"));
124
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000125STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000126STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
127 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
128STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
129 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
130STATISTIC(
131 NumLookupTablesHoles,
132 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000133STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000134STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
135 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000136STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000137
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000138namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000139
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000140// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
141// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
142// cases composing the case group.
143typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000144 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000145// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
146// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
147// switch for that PHI.
148typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000149
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000150/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
151struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
152 ConstantInt *Value;
153 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000154
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000155 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000156 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
157
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000158 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
159 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
160 return Value < RHS.Value;
161 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000162
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000163 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
164};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000165
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000166class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000167 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000168 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000169 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000170 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000171 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000172 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000173 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
174 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000175 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000176 BasicBlock *Pred,
177 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000178 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
179 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000180
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000181 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000182 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000183 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
184 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000185 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000186 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000187 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000188 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000189 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
190 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000191
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000192public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000193 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000194 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000195 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000196 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000197 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000198
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000199 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
200};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000201
202} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000203
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000204/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000205/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000206static bool
207SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000208 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000209 if (SI1 == SI2)
210 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000211
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000212 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
213 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
214 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
215 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
216 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000217
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000218 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
219 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000220 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
221 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
222 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000223 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
224 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000225 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
226 if (FailBlocks)
227 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
228 Fail = true;
229 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000230 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000231
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000232 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000233}
234
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000235/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
236/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
237/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000238static bool
239isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
240 Instruction *Cond,
241 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
242 if (SI1 == SI2)
243 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000244 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
245
246 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000247 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000248 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
249 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
250 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
251 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000252 if (!Ci2)
253 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000254 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
255 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
256 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
257 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
258 return false;
259
260 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
261 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000262 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000263 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
264 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
265 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000266 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
267 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000268 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000269 return false;
270 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
271 }
272 return true;
273}
274
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000275/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
276/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
277/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
278/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000279static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
280 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000281 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
282 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000283
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000284 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000285 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000286 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000287}
288
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000289/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
290/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
291/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000292/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000293static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000294 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000295 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000296 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000297 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000298}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000299
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000300/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
301/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000302/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
303/// which works well enough for us.
304///
305/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000306/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
307/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
308/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
309/// set and true is returned.
310///
311/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
312/// Select whose cost is 2.
313///
314/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
315/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
316/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000317static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000318 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000319 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000320 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
321 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000322 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
323 // so limit the recursion depth.
324 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
325 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
326 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
327 return false;
328
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000329 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000330 if (!I) {
331 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
332 // can be executed unconditionally.
333 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
334 if (C->canTrap())
335 return false;
336 return true;
337 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000338 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000339
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000340 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000341 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000342 if (PBB == BB)
343 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000344
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000345 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
346 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000347 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
348 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000349 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000350 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000351
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
353 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000354 if (!AggressiveInsts)
355 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000356
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000357 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000358 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
359 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000360
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000361 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
362 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
363 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000364 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000365 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000366
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000367 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000368
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000369 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
370 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
371 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
372 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
373 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
374 // enabled further IR optimizations.
375 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
376 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000377 return false;
378
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000379 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
380 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000381
382 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
383 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000384 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000385 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
386 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000387 return false;
388 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
389 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000390 return true;
391}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000392
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000393/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000394/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000395static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000396 // Normal constant int.
397 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000398 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000399 return CI;
400
401 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
402 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000403 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000404
405 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
406 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
407 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
408
409 // IntToPtr const int.
410 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
411 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
412 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
413 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
414 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
415 return CI;
416 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000417 return cast<ConstantInt>(
418 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000419 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000420 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000421}
422
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000423namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000424
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000425/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
426/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
427/// structure.
428/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
429/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
430/// representing the different cases for the switch.
431/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
432/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
433/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
434/// fail.
435struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000436 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000437 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
438 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
439 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
440 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000441
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000442 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000443 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
444 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
445 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000446 }
447
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000448 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000449 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000450 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000451 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000452
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000453private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000454 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
455 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
456 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000457 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
458 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000459 CompValue = NewVal;
460 return (CompValue != nullptr);
461 }
462
463 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
464 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
465 /// match depending on isEQ).
466 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
467 /// against is placed in CompValue.
468 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
469 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000470 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000471 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
472 ICmpInst *ICI;
473 ConstantInt *C;
474 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000475 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000476 return false;
477 }
478
479 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000480 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000481
482 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000483 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000484 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000485 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000486
487 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
488 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
489
490 /*
491 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
492 x : BITVECTOR(64);
493 y : BITVECTOR(64);
494 z : BITVECTOR(64);
495 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
496 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
497 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
498 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000499 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
500 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
501 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000502 */
503
504 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
505 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
506 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
507 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
508 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
509 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
510 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
511
512 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
513 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
514 //
515 // mask = (1 << z)
516 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
517 //
518 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
519 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
520
521 // Pattern match a special case:
522 /*
523 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
524 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
525 );
526 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000527 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000528 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
529 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000530 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000531 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000532 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 return false;
534
535 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000536 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000537 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
538 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000539 UsedICmps++;
540 return true;
541 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000542 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000544 // Pattern match a special case:
545 /*
546 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
547 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
548 );
549 */
550 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
551 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
552 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
553 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
554 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
555 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
556 return false;
557
558 Vals.push_back(C);
559 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
560 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
561 UsedICmps++;
562 return true;
563 }
564 }
565
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000566 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000567 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000568 return false;
569
570 UsedICmps++;
571 Vals.push_back(C);
572 return ICI->getOperand(0);
573 }
574
575 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000576 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
577 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000578
579 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
580 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
581 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000582 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
583 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
585 }
586
587 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
588 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
589 // x != 0 && x != 1.
590 if (!isEQ)
591 Span = Span.inverse();
592
593 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
594 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
595 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000596 }
597
598 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000599 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000600 return false;
601
602 // Add all values from the range to the set
603 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
604 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000605
606 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000607 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000608 }
609
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000610 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
612 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
613 /// vector.
614 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000615 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000616 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
617 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000618
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000619 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
620 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000621 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000622
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000623 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000624 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000625 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000626
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000627 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000628 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000629
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000630 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
631 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
632 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000633 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
634 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
635 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
636 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000637 continue;
638 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000639
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000640 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000641 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000642 // Match succeed, continue the loop
643 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000644 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000645
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000646 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
647 // comparison against the same value as the others.
648 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
649 if (!Extra) {
650 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000651 continue;
652 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000653 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
654 CompValue = nullptr;
655 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000656 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000657 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000658};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000659
660} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000661
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000662static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000663 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000664 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
665 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
666 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
667 if (BI->isConditional())
668 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000669 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
670 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000671 }
672
673 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000674 if (Cond)
675 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000676}
677
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000678/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000679/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000680Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000681 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000682 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
683 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
684 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000685 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
686 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
687 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000688 CV = SI->getCondition();
689 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000691 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000692 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000693 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000694 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000695
696 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000697 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000698 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
699 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000700 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000701 CV = Ptr;
702 }
703 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000704 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000705}
706
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000707/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000708/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000709BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
710 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000711 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000712 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000713 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
714 ++i)
715 Cases.push_back(
716 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000717 return SI->getDefaultDest();
718 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000719
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000720 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000721 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000722 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000723 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
724 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000725 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000726}
727
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000728/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000729/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000730static void
731EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
732 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000733 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000734}
735
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000736/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000737static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
738 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000739 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
740
741 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
742 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
743 std::swap(V1, V2);
744
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000745 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000746 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000747 if (V1->size() == 1) {
748 // Just scan V2.
749 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
750 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
751 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
752 return true;
753 }
754
755 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
756 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
757 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
758 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
759 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
760 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
761 return true;
762 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
763 ++i1;
764 else
765 ++i2;
766 }
767 return false;
768}
769
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000770/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
771/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
772/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
773/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
774/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000775bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
776 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000777 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000778 if (!PredVal)
779 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000780
781 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
782 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000783 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
784 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000785
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000786 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
787 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
788
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000789 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000790 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000791 BasicBlock *PredDef =
792 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
793 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000794
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000795 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000796 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000798 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000799
800 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
801 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
802 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
803 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
804 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
805 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000806 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000807 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000808
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000809 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
810 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
811 // uncond br.
812 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
813 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000814 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000815 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000816
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000817 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000818 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000819
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000820 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000821 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
822 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000823
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000824 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
825 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000826 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000827
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000828 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
829 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000830 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000831 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
832 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000833
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000834 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000835 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000836
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000837 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
838 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000839 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000840 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
841 if (HasWeight)
842 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
843 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000844 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000845 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
846 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000847 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
848 --i;
849 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000850 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000851 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000852 Weights.pop_back();
853 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000854 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
855 SI->removeCase(i);
856 }
857 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000858 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000859 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000860 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
861 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000862
863 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000864 return true;
865 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000866
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000867 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
868 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000869 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000870 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000871 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
872 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000873 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000874 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000875 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
876 }
877 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000878
879 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
880 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000881 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000882 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
883 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
884 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
885 break;
886 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000887
888 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000889 if (!TheRealDest)
890 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000891
892 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
893 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000894 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
895 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
896 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000897 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000898 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000899
900 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000901 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000902 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000903
904 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000905 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
906 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000907
908 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
909 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000910}
911
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000912namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000913
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000914/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
915/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
916/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
917struct ConstantIntOrdering {
918 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
919 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
920 }
921};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000922
923} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000924
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000925static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
926 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
927 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
928 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000929 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000930 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000931 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000932}
933
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000934static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000935 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000936 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000937 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000938 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
939
940 return false;
941}
942
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000943/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
944/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
945/// metadata.
946static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
947 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000948 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000949 assert(MD);
950 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000951 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000952 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000953 }
954
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000955 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
956 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
957 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000958 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000959 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
960 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
961 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
962 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000963 }
964}
965
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000966/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000967static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000968 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
969 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
970 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
971 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
972 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000973 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000974}
975
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000976/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
977/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000978/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
979/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000980bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
981 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000982 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000983 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000984 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
985 bool Changed = false;
986
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000987 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000988 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000989 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000990
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000991 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
992 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000993 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000994
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000995 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000996 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000997 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
998 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
999 std::vector<BasicBlock*> Blocks = { TI->getParent() };
1000 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, Blocks, ".fold.split"))
1001 return false;
1002 }
1003 }
1004
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001005 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001006 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001007 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1008
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001009 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001010 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1011
1012 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1013 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1014 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001015 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001017 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1018 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001019 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1020 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1021
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001022 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001023 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001024 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001025 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1026 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1027 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001028 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1029 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1030 // successor's weights
1031 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001032
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001033 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001034 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001035 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001036 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001037 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1038 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1039 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001040 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001041
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001042 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1043 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1044 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001045 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001046 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1047 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1048 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1049 else {
1050 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1051 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001052
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001053 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1054 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001055 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1056 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001057 Weights.pop_back();
1058 }
1059
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001060 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001061 --i;
1062 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001063 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001064
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001065 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001066 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1067 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1068 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1069 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1070 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001071
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001072 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1073 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001074 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1075 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1076 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1077 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1078 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001079 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1080 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1081 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1082 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001083 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1084 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001085 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001086 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001087
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001088 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1089 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1090 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1091 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1092 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1093 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1094 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1095 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001096 } else {
1097 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1098 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1099 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001100 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1101 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001102 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1103 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1104 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001105
1106 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001107 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1108 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001109 Weights.pop_back();
1110 }
1111
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001112 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1113 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001114 --i;
1115 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001116 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001117
1118 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1119 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001120 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1121 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1122 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001123 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1124 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001125 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1126 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001127 PTIHandled.erase(
1128 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001129 }
1130
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001131 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1132 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001133 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001134 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001135 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1136 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001137 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001138 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001139 }
1140
1141 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1142 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1143 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001144 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1145 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001146
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001147 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001148 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001149 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001150 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001151 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001152 }
1153
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001154 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001155 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1156 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001157 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001158 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1159 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001160
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001161 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1162 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1163 FitWeights(Weights);
1164
1165 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1166
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001167 NewSI->setMetadata(
1168 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1169 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001170 }
1171
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001172 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001173
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001174 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1175 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1176 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001177 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001178 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1179 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001180 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001181 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001182 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001183 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1184 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001185 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001186 }
1187 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1188 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001189
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001190 Changed = true;
1191 }
1192 }
1193 return Changed;
1194}
1195
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001196// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1197// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1198// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001199static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1200 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001201 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001202 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001203 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001204 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1205 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1206 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001207 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001208 return false;
1209 }
1210 }
1211 }
1212 return true;
1213}
1214
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001215static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1216
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001217/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1218/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1219/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001220static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001221 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001222 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1223 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1224 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1225 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1226 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001227 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1228 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001229
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001230 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1231 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1232
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001233 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001234 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1235 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1236 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1237 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1238 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001239 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001240 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001241 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001242 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001243 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001244 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245 return false;
1246
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001247 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001248
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001249 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001250 do {
1251 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1252 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1253 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1254 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001255
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001256 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1257 return Changed;
1258
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001259 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1260 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1261 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001262 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001263 if (!I2->use_empty())
1264 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001265 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001266 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1267 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1268 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1269 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1270 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1271 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1272 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1273 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1274 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1275 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001276 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001277
Robert Lougherb0124c12017-01-12 21:11:09 +00001278 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1279 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1280 if (!isa<CallInst>(I1))
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +00001281 I1->setDebugLoc(
1282 DILocation::getMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc()));
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001283
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001284 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001285 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001286
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001287 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1288 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001289 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1290 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1291 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1292 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1293 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001294 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001295 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001296 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001297 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001298 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001299
1300 return true;
1301
1302HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001303 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1304 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001305 return Changed;
1306
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001307 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001308 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001309 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001310 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1311 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1312 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1313 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1314 continue;
1315
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001316 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1317 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1318 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1319 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001320 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001321
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001322 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001323 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001324 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001325 return Changed;
1326 }
1327 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001328
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001329 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001330 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001331 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001332 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001333 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1334 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001335 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001336 }
1337
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001338 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001339 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1340 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1341 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1342 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001343 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001344 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001345 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001346 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001347 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001348 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1349 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001350 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1351 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001352
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001353 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1354 // that determines the right value.
1355 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001356 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001357 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1358 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1359 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001360
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001361 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1362 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1363 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1364 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001365 }
1366 }
1367
1368 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001369 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1370 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001371
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001372 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001373 return true;
1374}
1375
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001376// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1377// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1378static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1379 unsigned OpIdx) {
Hal Finkelac5803b2016-09-07 21:38:22 +00001380 // We can't have a PHI with a metadata type.
1381 if (I->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType()->isMetadataTy())
1382 return false;
1383
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001384 // Early exit.
1385 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1386 return true;
1387
1388 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1389 default:
1390 return true;
1391 case Instruction::Call:
1392 case Instruction::Invoke:
1393 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1394 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1395 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
Sanjoy Dasbc357e82016-10-12 18:15:33 +00001396 if (isa<IntrinsicInst>(I))
1397 return false;
1398
1399 // Constant bundle operands may need to retain their constant-ness for
1400 // correctness.
1401 if (ImmutableCallSite(I).isBundleOperand(OpIdx))
1402 return false;
1403
1404 return true;
1405
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001406 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1407 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1408 return OpIdx != 2;
1409 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1410 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1411 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1412 return OpIdx == 0;
1413 case Instruction::Alloca:
1414 return false;
1415 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1416 if (OpIdx == 0)
1417 return true;
1418 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
Peter Collingbourneab85225b2016-12-02 02:24:42 +00001419 return It.isSequential();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001420 }
1421}
1422
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001423// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1424// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1425// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1426// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1427// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1428static bool canSinkInstructions(
1429 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1430 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001431 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1432 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1433 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1434 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1435 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1436 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1437 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1438 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001439
1440 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1441 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1442 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1443 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1444 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1445 return false;
1446
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001447 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1448 // have no uses.
1449 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1450 return false;
1451 }
1452
1453 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1454 for (auto *I : Insts)
1455 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1456 return false;
1457
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001458 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1459 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1460 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1461 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001462 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1463 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001464 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1465 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001466 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001467 return (PNUse &&
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001468 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001469 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1470 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001471 }))
1472 return false;
1473 }
1474
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001475 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1476 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1477 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1478 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001479
1480 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1481 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1482 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1483 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1484 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1485 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1486 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1487 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1488 if (OI == 1 && isa<StoreInst>(I0) &&
1489 any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1490 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1491 }))
1492 return false;
1493 if (OI == 0 && isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1494 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1495 }))
1496 return false;
1497
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001498 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001499 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1500 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001501 };
1502 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1503 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1504 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1505 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001506 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1507 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001508 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1509 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001510 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001511 for (auto *I : Insts)
1512 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001513 }
1514 }
1515 return true;
1516}
1517
1518// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1519// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1520// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001521static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001522 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1523
1524 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1525 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1526 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001527 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1528 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1529 do {
1530 I = I->getPrevNode();
1531 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1532 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1533 Insts.push_back(I);
1534 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001535
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001536 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1537 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1538 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1539 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001540 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001541 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1542 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1543 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1544 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1545 return U == PNUse;
1546 }))
1547 return false;
1548 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001549
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001550 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1551 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001552 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1553 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1554 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1555 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1556 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1557 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1558 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1559 // small mess we may make.
1560 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1561 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1562 });
1563 if (!NeedPHI) {
1564 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1565 continue;
1566 }
1567
1568 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1569 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1570 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1571 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1572 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1573 for (auto *I : Insts)
1574 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1575 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1576 }
1577
1578 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1579 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1580 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1581 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1582 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1583
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001584 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations of
1585 // all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location of the
1586 // "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the loop below.
Robert Lougher6717a6f2017-01-12 18:33:49 +00001587 const DILocation *Loc = I0->getDebugLoc();
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001588
1589 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001590 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001591 if (I != I0) {
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001592 Loc = DILocation::getMergedLocation(Loc, I->getDebugLoc());
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001593 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001594 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1595 }
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001596 if (!isa<CallInst>(I0))
1597 I0->setDebugLoc(Loc);
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001598
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001599 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1600 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1601 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1602 // instruction and nuke it.
1603 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1604 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1605 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1606 PN->eraseFromParent();
1607 }
1608
1609 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1610 for (auto *I : Insts)
1611 if (I != I0)
1612 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001613
1614 return true;
1615}
1616
1617namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001618
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001619 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1620 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1621 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1622 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1623 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1624 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1625 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1626 // ...
1627 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1628 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1629 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1630 bool Fail;
1631 public:
1632 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) :
1633 Blocks(Blocks) {
1634 reset();
1635 }
1636
1637 void reset() {
1638 Fail = false;
1639 Insts.clear();
1640 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001641 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1642 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1643 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1644 if (!Inst) {
1645 // Block wasn't big enough.
1646 Fail = true;
1647 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001648 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001649 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001650 }
1651 }
1652
1653 bool isValid() const {
1654 return !Fail;
1655 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001656
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001657 void operator -- () {
1658 if (Fail)
1659 return;
1660 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001661 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1662 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001663 // Already at beginning of block.
1664 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001665 Fail = true;
1666 return;
1667 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001668 }
1669 }
1670
1671 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1672 return Insts;
1673 }
1674 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001675
1676} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001677
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001678/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001679/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1680/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1681/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1682static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1683 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001684 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1685
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001686 // We support two situations:
1687 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1688 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1689 //
1690 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1691 // else-if patterns;
1692 //
1693 // if (a) f(1);
1694 // else if (b) f(2);
1695 //
1696 // produces:
1697 //
1698 // [if]
1699 // / \
1700 // [f(1)] [if]
1701 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001702 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001703 // | [f(2)]|
1704 // \ | /
1705 // [ end ]
1706 //
1707 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1708 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1709 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1710 //
1711 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1712 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1713 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1714 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1715 //
1716 // [if]
1717 // / \
1718 // [x(1)] [if]
1719 // | | \
1720 // | | \
1721 // | [x(2)] |
1722 // \ / |
1723 // [sink.split] |
1724 // \ /
1725 // [ end ]
1726 //
1727 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1728 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
1729 for (auto *B : predecessors(BBEnd)) {
1730 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1731 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1732 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1733 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1734 Cond = T;
1735 else
1736 return false;
1737 }
1738 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001739 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001740
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001741 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001742 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1743 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1744 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1745 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1746 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1747 // PHIOperands.
1748 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1749 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1750 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001751 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001752 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1753 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1754 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1755 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1756 ++ScanIdx;
1757 --LRI;
1758 }
1759
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001760 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001761 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1762 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1763 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1764 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1765 ++NumPHIdValues;
1766 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1767 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1768 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1769 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001770
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001771 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1772 };
1773
1774 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001775 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1776 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1777 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1778 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1779 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1780 LRI.reset();
1781 unsigned Idx = 0;
1782 bool Profitable = false;
1783 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1784 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1785 Profitable = true;
1786 break;
1787 }
1788 --LRI;
1789 ++Idx;
1790 }
1791 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001792 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001793
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001794 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1795 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1796 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
1797 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BI1->getSuccessor(0), UnconditionalPreds,
1798 ".sink.split"))
1799 // Edges couldn't be split.
1800 return false;
1801 Changed = true;
1802 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001803
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001804 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1805 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1806 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1807 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1808 // per sunk instruction).
1809 //
1810 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1811 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1812 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1813 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1814 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1815 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1816 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1817 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001818 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001819 << "\n");
1820
1821 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1822 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001823 LRI.reset();
1824 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001825 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001826 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001827 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001828 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001829
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001830 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001831 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001832 NumSinkCommons++;
1833 Changed = true;
1834 }
1835 return Changed;
1836}
1837
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001838/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1839/// conditional block.
1840///
1841/// We are looking for code like the following:
1842/// BrBB:
1843/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1844/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1845/// ... // function).
1846/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1847/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1848/// ThenBB:
1849/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1850/// br label EndBB
1851/// EndBB:
1852/// ...
1853/// We are going to transform this into:
1854/// BrBB:
1855/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1856/// ... //
1857/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1858/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1859/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1860/// ...
1861///
1862/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1863/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001864static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1865 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001866 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1867 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001868 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001869
1870 // Volatile or atomic.
1871 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001872 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001873
1874 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1875
1876 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001877 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001878 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1879 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1880 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001881 // Skip debug info.
1882 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1883 continue;
1884 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001885
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001886 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001887 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001888 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001889
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001890 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1891 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1892 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1893 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1894 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001895 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001896 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001897 }
1898
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001899 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001900}
1901
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001902/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001903///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001904/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1905/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1906/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1907/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1908/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1909///
1910/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1911/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1912/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1913/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1914///
1915///
1916/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1917/// \code
1918/// BB:
1919/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1920/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1921/// ThenBB:
1922/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001923/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001924/// EndBB:
1925/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1926/// ...
1927/// \endcode
1928///
1929/// Into this IR:
1930/// \code
1931/// BB:
1932/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1933/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1934/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1935/// ...
1936/// \endcode
1937///
1938/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001939static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001940 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001941 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1942 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1943 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1944 return false;
1945
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001946 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1947 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1948
1949 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1950 // to swap the select operands later.
1951 bool Invert = false;
1952 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1953 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1954 Invert = true;
1955 }
1956 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1957
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001958 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1959 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1960 // - They are defined in BB, and
1961 // - They have no side effects, and
1962 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1963 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1964
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001965 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001966 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1967 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001968 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001969 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001970 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001971 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001972 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001973 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1974 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001975
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001976 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001977 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001978 ++SpeculationCost;
1979 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001980 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001981
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001982 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001983 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1984 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1985 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001986 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001987 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001988 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1989 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001990 return false;
1991
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001992 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1993 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1994 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1995
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001996 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001997 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001998 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001999 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002000 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002001 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002002 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
2003
2004 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002005 }
2006 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002007
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002008 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
2009 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2010 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002011 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2012 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2013 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002014 I != E; ++I)
2015 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002016 ++SpeculationCost;
2017 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002018 return false;
2019 }
2020
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002021 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2022 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002023 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002024 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002025 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2026 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002027
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002028 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002029 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002030 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002031 continue;
2032
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002033 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
2034 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
2035 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
2036 return false;
2037
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002038 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002039 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2040 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2041 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002042 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2043
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002044 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2045 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002046 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002047 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2048 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002049 unsigned MaxCost =
2050 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002051 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002052 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002053
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002054 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2055 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2056 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002057 // constant expression.
2058 ++SpeculationCost;
2059 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002060 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002061 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002062
2063 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2064 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002065 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002066 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002067
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002068 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002069 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002070
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002071 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2072 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002073 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002074 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2075 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2076 if (Invert)
2077 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002078 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2079 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002080 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00002081 SpeculatedStore->setDebugLoc(
2082 DILocation::getMergedLocation(
2083 BI->getDebugLoc(), SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc()));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002084 }
2085
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002086 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2087 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002088 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002089 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2090
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002091 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002092 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2093 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002094
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002095 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002096 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002097 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
2098 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
2099 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2100 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2101 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2102 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2103
2104 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2105 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2106 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002107
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002108 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002109 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2110 // destinations were inverted.
2111 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002112 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002113 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002114 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
2115 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002116 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2117 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002118 }
2119
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002120 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002121 return true;
2122}
2123
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002124/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002125static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2126 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002127 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002128
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002129 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002130 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2131 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002132 if (Size > 10)
2133 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002134 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002135
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002136 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002137 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002138 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2139 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002140 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2141 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002142 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002143
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002144 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2145 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002146
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002147 return true;
2148}
2149
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002150/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2151/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2152/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002153static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002154 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2155 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002156 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2157 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002158 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2159 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002160
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002161 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2162 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002163 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002164 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002165 }
2166
2167 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002168 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2169 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002170
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002171 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002172 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002173 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2174 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2175 }))
2176 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002177
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002178 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2179 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002180 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002181 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002182 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2183 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002184
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002185 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2186 // branch to RealDest.
2187 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2188 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002189
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002190 if (RealDest == BB)
2191 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002192 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002193 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2194 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002195
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002196 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2197 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2198 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2199 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002200 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2201 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2202 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002203 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002204
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002205 // Update PHI nodes.
2206 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002207
2208 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2209 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2210 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2211 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002212 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002213 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2214 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2215 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2216 continue;
2217 }
2218 // Clone the instruction.
2219 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002220 if (BBI->hasName())
2221 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002222
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002223 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002224 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2225 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002226 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2227 *i = PI->second;
2228 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002229
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002230 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002231 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002232 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2233 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2234 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2235 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
2236 N = nullptr;
2237 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002238 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002239 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002240 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002241 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002242 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2243 if (N)
2244 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002245 }
2246
2247 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2248 // to EdgeBB instead.
2249 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2250 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2251 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2252 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2253 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2254 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002255
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002256 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002257 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002258 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002259
2260 return false;
2261}
2262
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002263/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2264/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002265static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2266 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002267 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2268 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2269 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2270 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2271 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2272 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002273 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2274 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2275 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002276 if (!IfCond ||
2277 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2278 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2279 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002280
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002281 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2282 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2283 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2284 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2285 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2286 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2287 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2288 if (NumPhis > 2)
2289 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002290
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002291 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2292 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2293 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002294 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002295 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2296 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002297 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2298 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002299
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002300 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2301 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002302 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002303 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002304 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002305 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002306 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002307
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002308 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002309 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002310 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002311 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002312 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002313 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002314
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002315 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002316 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2317 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002318 if (!PN)
2319 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002320
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002321 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2322 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2323 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2324 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2325 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2326 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2327 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002328
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002329 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2330 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2331 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2332 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002333 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002334 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2335 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2336 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002337 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002338 } else {
2339 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002340 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2341 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002342 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002343 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002344 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2345 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002346 return false;
2347 }
2348 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002349
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002350 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002351 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002352 } else {
2353 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002354 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2355 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002356 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002357 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002358 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2359 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002360 return false;
2361 }
2362 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002363
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002364 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002365 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002366
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002367 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2368 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002369 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002370 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002371
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002372 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2373 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002374 if (IfBlock1) {
2375 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2376 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002377 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002378 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002379 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002380 }
2381 if (IfBlock2) {
2382 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2383 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002384 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002385 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002386 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002387 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002388
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002389 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2390 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002391 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002392 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002393
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002394 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2395 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2396 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002397 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002398 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002399
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002400 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2401 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2402 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2403 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002404 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2405 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002406 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002407 return true;
2408}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002409
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002410/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2411/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002412/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002413static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002414 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002415 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2416 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2417 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2418 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2419 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002420
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002421 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2422 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2423 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002424 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002425 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002426 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002427 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002428
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002429 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002430 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2431 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2432 // branch into a return.
2433 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2434 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2435 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002436 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002437 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002438 return true;
2439 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002440
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002441 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2442 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2443 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2444 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002445
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002446 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2447 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2448 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2449 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2450 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2451 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2452 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002453
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002454 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2455 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2456 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2457 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2458 // safe.
2459 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2460 if (TCV->canTrap())
2461 return false;
2462 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2463 if (FCV->canTrap())
2464 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002465
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002466 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2467 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2468 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2469 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002470
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002471 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2472 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002473 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002474 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002475 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2476 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2477 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2478 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002479 TrueValue =
2480 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002481 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002482 }
2483
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002484 Value *RI =
2485 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002486
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002487 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002488
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002489 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002490 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002491 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002492
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002493 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2494
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002495 return true;
2496}
2497
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002498/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002499/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002500static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002501 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2502 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002503 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2504 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002505 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2506 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2507 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2508 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2509 return true;
2510 }
2511 }
2512 return false;
2513}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002514
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002515/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2516/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2517/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2518static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2519 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2520 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2521 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2522 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2523 bool PredHasWeights =
2524 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2525 bool SuccHasWeights =
2526 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2527 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2528 if (!PredHasWeights)
2529 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2530 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2531 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2532 return true;
2533 } else {
2534 return false;
2535 }
2536}
2537
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002538/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2539/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2540/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002541bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002542 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002543
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002544 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002545 if (BI->isConditional())
2546 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2547 else {
2548 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2549 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2550 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2551 // predecessor.
2552 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2553 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2554 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2555 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2556 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002557 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002558 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002559 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2560 Cond = Curr;
2561 break;
2562 }
2563 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2564 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2565 return false;
2566 }
2567 }
2568
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002569 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002570 return false;
2571 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002572
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002573 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2574 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002575 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002576
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002577 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002578 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002579
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002580 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002581 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2582 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002583
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002584 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002585 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002586
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002587 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2588 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2589 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2590 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2591 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2592 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002593 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002594 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2595 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2596 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002597 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002598 return false;
2599 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2600 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2601 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2602 return false;
2603 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2604 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2605 // and Cond.
2606 ++NumBonusInsts;
2607 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2608 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2609 return false;
2610 }
2611
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002612 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2613 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2614 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2615 if (CE->canTrap())
2616 return false;
2617 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2618 if (CE->canTrap())
2619 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002620
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002621 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002622 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002623 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002624 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2625 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002626
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002627 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2628 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002629 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002630
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002631 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2632 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2633 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002634 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002635 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002636 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002637 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2638 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002639 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002640
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002641 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002642 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002643 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002644
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002645 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002646 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002647 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002648 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002649 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002650 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2651 Opc = Instruction::And;
2652 InvertPredCond = true;
2653 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2654 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2655 InvertPredCond = true;
2656 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002657 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002658 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002659 } else {
2660 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2661 continue;
2662 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002663
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002664 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002665 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002666
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002667 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2668 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002669 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002670
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002671 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2672 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2673 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2674 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002675 NewCond =
2676 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002677 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002678
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002679 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002680 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002681 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002682
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002683 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002684 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002685 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2686 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2687 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002688 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002689 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002690 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002691 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2692 continue;
2693 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2694 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002695 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002696 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002697
2698 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2699 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2700 // only given the branch precondition.
2701 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2702 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002703 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002704
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002705 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2706 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002707 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002708 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002709
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002710 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2711 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002712 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002713 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002714 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002715 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002716 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002717 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002718
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002719 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002720 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2721 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002722 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2723
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002724 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002725 bool HasWeights =
2726 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2727 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002728 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2729
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002730 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002731 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002732 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2733 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002734 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002735 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002736 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002737 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2738 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2739 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002740 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2741 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2742 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002743 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002744 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2745 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2746 }
2747 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002748 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002749 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2750 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002751 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002752 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002753 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2754 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2755 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2756 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002757 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2758 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002759 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2760 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2761 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002762 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2763 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2764 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2765
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002766 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2767 NewWeights.end());
2768 PBI->setMetadata(
2769 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2770 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002771 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002772 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002773 } else {
2774 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2775 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002776 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002777 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002778 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002779 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002780 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2781 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2782 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2783 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002784 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2785 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2786 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2787 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002788 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002789 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2790 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002791 } else {
2792 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2793 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2794 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002795 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2796 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002797 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002798 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2799 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2800 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2801 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002802 }
2803 }
2804 // Update PHI Node.
2805 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2806 MergedCond);
2807 }
2808 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2809 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2810 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2811 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002812 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002813
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002814 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2815 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2816 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2817 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2818
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002819 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2820 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2821
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002822 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002823 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2824 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2825 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002826
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002827 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002828 }
2829 return false;
2830}
2831
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002832// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2833// nullptr.
2834static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2835 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2836 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2837 if (!BB)
2838 continue;
2839 for (auto &I : *BB)
2840 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2841 if (S)
2842 // Multiple stores seen.
2843 return nullptr;
2844 else
2845 S = SI;
2846 }
2847 }
2848 return S;
2849}
2850
2851static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2852 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2853 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2854 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2855 //
2856 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2857 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2858 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2859 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2860 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2861 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2862 // one.
2863 //
2864 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2865 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2866 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2867 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2868 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002869
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002870 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2871 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2872 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2873 if (!AlternativeV)
2874 break;
2875
2876 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2877 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2878 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2879 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2880 break;
2881 PHI = nullptr;
2882 }
2883 if (PHI)
2884 return PHI;
2885
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002886 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2887 if (!AlternativeV &&
2888 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2889 return V;
2890
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002891 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002892 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2893 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2894 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002895 PHI->addIncoming(
2896 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002897 return PHI;
2898}
2899
2900static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2901 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2902 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2903 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2904 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2905 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2906 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2907 };
2908
2909 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2910 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2911 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2912 if (!BB)
2913 return true;
2914 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2915 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2916 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002917 unsigned N = 0;
2918 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2919 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2920 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2921 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2922 ++N;
2923 // Free instructions.
2924 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2925 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2926 continue;
2927 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002928 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002929 }
2930 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002931 };
2932
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002933 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2934 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2935 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002936 return false;
2937
2938 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2939 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2940 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2941 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2942 // testing.
2943 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2944 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2945 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2946 return false;
2947
2948 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2949 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2950 return false;
2951
2952 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2953 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2954 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2955 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2956 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2957 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2958 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2959 //
2960 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2961 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2962 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2963 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2964 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2965 return false;
2966 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2967 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2968 return false;
2969 if (QTB)
2970 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2971 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2972 return false;
2973 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2974 I != E; ++I)
2975 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2976 return false;
2977
2978 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2979 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2980 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2981 ->getCondition();
2982 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2983 ->getCondition();
2984
2985 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2986 PStore->getParent());
2987 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2988 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2989
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002990 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2991
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002992 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2993 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2994
2995 if (InvertPCond)
2996 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2997 if (InvertQCond)
2998 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2999 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3000
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003001 auto *T =
3002 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003003 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3004 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3005 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3006 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3007 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3008 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
3009
3010 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3011 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003012
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003013 return true;
3014}
3015
3016static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
3017 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3018 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3019 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3020 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3021 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3022 // PBI and QBI.
3023 //
3024 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3025 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3026 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3027 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3028 //
3029 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3030 //
3031 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3032 // / \ | \
3033 // PTB PFB | PFB
3034 // \ / | /
3035 // QBI QBI
3036 // / \ | \
3037 // QTB QFB | QFB
3038 // \ / | /
3039 // PostBB PostBB
3040 //
3041 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3042 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3043 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003044 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003045 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3046 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3047 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3048 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3049 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3050
3051 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3052 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3053 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3054 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3055 InvertPCond = true;
3056 }
3057 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3058 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3059 InvertQCond = true;
3060 }
3061
3062 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3063 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3064 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3065 PTB = nullptr;
3066 if (QTB == PostBB)
3067 QTB = nullptr;
3068
3069 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3070 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3071 // predecessor.
3072 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003073 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003074 };
3075 if (!PostBB ||
3076 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
3077 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3078 return false;
3079 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3080 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3081 return false;
3082 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
3083 return false;
3084
3085 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3086 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003087 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003088 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3089 if (!BB)
3090 continue;
3091 for (auto &I : *BB)
3092 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3093 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3094 }
3095 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3096 if (!BB)
3097 continue;
3098 for (auto &I : *BB)
3099 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3100 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3101 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003102
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003103 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3104 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3105 // clear what it contains.
3106 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3107
3108 bool Changed = false;
3109 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3110 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
3111 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
3112 return Changed;
3113}
3114
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003115/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3116/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003117/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3118/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003119static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3120 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003121 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3122 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003123
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003124 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003125 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003126 // this conditional branch redundant.
3127 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3128 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3129 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3130 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3131 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3132 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3133 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003134 BI->setCondition(
3135 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3136 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003137 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003138
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003139 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3140 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3141 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3142 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003143 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003144 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3145 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3146 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003147 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3148 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3149 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003150 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003151 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003152 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3153 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003154 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3155 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003156 NewPN->addIncoming(
3157 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3158 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003159 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003160 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003161 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003162 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003163
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003164 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003165 return true;
3166 }
3167 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003168
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003169 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3170 if (CE->canTrap())
3171 return false;
3172
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003173 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3174 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3175 // merged store at the end.
3176 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
3177 return true;
3178
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003179 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003180 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003181 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003182 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3183 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3184 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3185 ++BBI;
3186 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003187 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003188
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003189 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003190 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3191 PBIOp = 0;
3192 BIOp = 0;
3193 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3194 PBIOp = 0;
3195 BIOp = 1;
3196 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3197 PBIOp = 1;
3198 BIOp = 0;
3199 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3200 PBIOp = 1;
3201 BIOp = 1;
3202 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003203 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003204 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003205
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003206 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3207 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3208 // keep getting unwound.
3209 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3210 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003211
3212 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003213 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3214 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003215
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003216 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3217 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3218 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3219
3220 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003221 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003222 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3223 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003224 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3225 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003226
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003227 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3228 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3229 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3230 if (CE->canTrap())
3231 return false;
3232
3233 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3234 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3235 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3236 if (CE->canTrap())
3237 return false;
3238 }
3239
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003240 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003241 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003242
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003243 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003244 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003245
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003246 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3247 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3248 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3249 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3250 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3251 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3252 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3253 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3254 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3255 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003256 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3257 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003258 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3259 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003260 }
3261
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003262 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003263
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003264 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3265 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003266
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003267 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3268 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003269 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003270 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003271 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003272
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003273 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3274 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003275 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003276
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003277 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003278 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003279
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003280 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3281 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3282 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3283 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003284
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003285 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3286 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003287 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003288 bool HasWeights =
3289 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3290 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003291 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003292 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3293 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3294 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3295 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003296 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3297 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3298 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003299 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3300 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3301 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003302 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003303 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3304
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003305 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003306 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3307 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003308 }
3309
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003310 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3311 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003312 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003313
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003314 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3315 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3316 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3317 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003318 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003319 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3320 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3321 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3322 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3323 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3324 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3325 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003326 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3327 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003328 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003329 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3330 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3331 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3332 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003333 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003334 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3335 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3336 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3337 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3338 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3339 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3340 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3341 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3342
3343 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3344
3345 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3346 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3347 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3348 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003349 }
3350 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003351
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003352 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3353 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003354
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003355 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3356 // one fewer predecessor.
3357 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003358}
3359
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003360// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3361// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003362// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3363// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3364// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3365static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003366 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3367 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003368 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003369 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3370 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3371 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3372 // successor.
3373 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003374 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003375
3376 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003377 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003378 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3379 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003380 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003381 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003382 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003383 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003384 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3385 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003386 }
3387
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003388 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3389 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3390
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003391 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003392 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003393 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3394 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3395 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003396 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003397 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003398 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3399 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003400 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3401 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3402 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003403 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3404 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003405 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003406 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3407 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3408 // terminator must be unreachable.
3409 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3410 } else {
3411 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3412 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3413 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003414 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003415 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003416 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003417 else
3418 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003419 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003420 }
3421
3422 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3423 return true;
3424}
3425
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003426// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003427// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3428// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3429// unconditional otherwise.
3430static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3431 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3432 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3433 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3434 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3435 return false;
3436
3437 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3438 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003439 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3440 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003441
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003442 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3443 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3444 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3445 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3446 if (HasWeights) {
3447 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3448 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003449 TrueWeight =
3450 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3451 FalseWeight =
3452 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003453 }
3454 }
3455
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003456 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003457 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3458 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003459}
3460
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003461// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003462// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3463// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3464// with
3465// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3466static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3467 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3468 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3469 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3470 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3471 return false;
3472
3473 // Extract the actual blocks.
3474 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3475 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3476
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003477 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003478 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3479 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003480}
3481
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003482/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3483/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003484/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3485/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3486/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3487/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3488/// like:
3489///
3490/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3491/// DEFAULT:
3492/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3493/// br label %end
3494/// end:
3495/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003496///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003497/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3498/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003499static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003500 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003501 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3502 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003503 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003504
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003505 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3506 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003507 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3508 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003509
3510 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3511 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003512
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003513 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3514 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3515 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3516 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003517 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3518 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003519
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003520 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3521 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3522 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003523
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003524 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3525 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3526 // away.
3527 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3528 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3529 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3530 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003531
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003532 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003533 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003534 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3535 }
3536 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003537 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003538 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003539
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003540 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3541 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3542 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003543 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003544 Value *V;
3545 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3546 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3547 else
3548 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003549
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003550 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3551 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3552 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003553 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003554 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003555
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003556 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3557 // the block.
3558 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003559 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003560 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003561 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3562 return false;
3563
3564 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3565 // true in the PHI.
3566 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003567 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003568
3569 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3570 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3571
3572 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3573 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3574 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3575 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3576
3577 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3578 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003579 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3580 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003581 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3582 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3583 if (HasWeights) {
3584 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3585 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3586 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003587 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003588 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3589
3590 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003591 SI->setMetadata(
3592 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3593 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003594 }
3595 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003596 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003597
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003598 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003599 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3600 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3601 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003602 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3603 return true;
3604}
3605
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003606/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003607/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3608/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003609static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3610 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003611 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003612 if (!Cond)
3613 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003614
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003615 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3616 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3617 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003618
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003619 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003620 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3621 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003622 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003623 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3624 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3625 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003626
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003627 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003628 if (!CompVal)
3629 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003630
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003631 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3632 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3633 return false;
3634
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003635 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3636
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003637 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3638 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3639 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3640 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003641
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003642 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003643 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003644 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3645 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003646
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003647 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3648 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3649
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003650 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3651 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003652 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3653 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3654 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003655
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003656 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003657
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003658 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003659 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3660 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003661
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003662 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3663 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3664 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3665 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003666 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3667 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003668 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3669 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003670 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3671
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003672 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003673 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003674 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003675 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003676
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003677 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003678
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003679 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3680 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003681 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003682
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003683 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003684 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003685 BB = NewBB;
3686 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003687
3688 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003689 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3690 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003691 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3692 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003693 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003694
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003695 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003696 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003697
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003698 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3699 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3700 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003701
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003702 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3703 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3704 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003705 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003706 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3707 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003708 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003709 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3710 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003711
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003712 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3713 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003714
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003715 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003716 return true;
3717}
3718
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003719bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003720 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3721 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3722 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3723 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3724 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3725 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003726
3727 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003728}
3729
3730// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3731bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3732 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3733
3734 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3735 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3736 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003737 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003738 while (++I != E)
3739 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3740 return false;
3741
3742 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3743 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3744
3745 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003746 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3747 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003748 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3749 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3750
3751 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3752 // it has other dependents.
3753 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3754 continue;
3755
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003756 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003757 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3758 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3759 continue;
3760
3761 bool isTrivial = true;
3762
3763 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3764 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3765 while (++I != E)
3766 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3767 isTrivial = false;
3768 break;
3769 }
3770
3771 if (isTrivial)
3772 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3773 }
3774
3775 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003776 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3777 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003778
3779 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3780 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3781 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3782 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3783 // to remove them all.
3784 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3785 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3786
3787 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3788 PI != PE;) {
3789 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3790 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3791 }
3792
3793 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3794 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3795 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3796 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3797 // predecessors.
3798 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3799 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3800 }
3801
3802 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3803 if (pred_empty(BB))
3804 BB->eraseFromParent();
3805
3806 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3807}
3808
3809// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3810bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003811 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3812 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003813 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3814 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003815
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003816 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3817 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003818 while (++I != E)
3819 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3820 return false;
3821
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003822 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003823 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3824 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3825 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003826 }
3827
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003828 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3829 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003830 if (LoopHeaders)
3831 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003832 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003833}
3834
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003835static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003836 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3837 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3838 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3839 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3840 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3841 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3842 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3843 // simplified.
3844 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003845 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3846 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003847 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3848 return false;
3849
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003850 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3851 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3852 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3853 return false;
3854
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003855 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003856 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003857 while (++I != E) {
3858 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3859 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003860 return false;
3861
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003862 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3863 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3864 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3865 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3866 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3867 break;
3868 default:
3869 return false;
3870 }
3871 }
3872
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003873 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3874 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003875 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003876 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003877
3878 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3879 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3880 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3881 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3882 // are both EH pads).
3883 if (UnwindDest) {
3884 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3885 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003886 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003887 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003888 I != IE; ++I) {
3889 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003890
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003891 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003892 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003893 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003894 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3895 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3896 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3897 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3898 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3899 // pad being removed.
3900 //
3901 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3902 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3903 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3904 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3905 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3906 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3907
3908 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3909 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3910
3911 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3912 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3913 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3914 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003915 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003916 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003917 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3918 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3919 }
3920 } else {
3921 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3922 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3923 // predecessors with this value.
3924 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3925 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3926 }
3927 }
3928 }
3929
3930 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003931 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003932 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3933 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003934 I != IE;) {
3935 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3936 // being moved to another block.
3937 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3938 if (PN->use_empty())
3939 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3940 // when we erase BB below.
3941 continue;
3942
3943 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3944 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3945 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3946 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3947 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3948 if (pred != BB)
3949 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3950 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3951 }
3952 }
3953
3954 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3955 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3956 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003957 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003958 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003959 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003960 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003961 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003962 }
3963 }
3964
3965 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3966 BB->eraseFromParent();
3967 return true;
3968}
3969
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003970// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3971static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3972 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3973 // with.
3974 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3975 if (!UnwindDest)
3976 return false;
3977
3978 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3979 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3980 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3981 return false;
3982
3983 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3984 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3985 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3986 return false;
3987
3988 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3989 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3990 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3991 // funclet bundle operands.
3992 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3993 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3994 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3995 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3996 // destination.
3997 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3998 RI->eraseFromParent();
3999
4000 return true;
4001}
4002
4003bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004004 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4005 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4006 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4007 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4008 return false;
4009
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004010 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004011 return true;
4012
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004013 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004014 return true;
4015
4016 return false;
4017}
4018
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004019bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004020 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004021 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4022 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004023
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004024 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004025 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4026 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004027 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4028 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004029 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4030 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4031 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4032 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4033 else
4034 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4035 }
4036 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004037
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004038 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004039 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004040 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4041 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4042 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004043 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004044 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004045 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004046
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004047 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004048 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004049 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4050 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004051 if (LoopHeaders)
4052 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004053 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004054
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004055 return true;
4056 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004057
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004058 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4059 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4060 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4061 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4062 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004063
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004064 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4065 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4066 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004067 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004068 return true;
4069 }
4070 return false;
4071}
4072
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004073bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4074 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004075
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004076 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004077
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004078 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4079 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004080 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4081 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004082 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004083 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4084 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4085 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004086 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4087 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004088
4089 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004090 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004091 if (SI->isVolatile())
4092 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004093 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004094 if (LI->isVolatile())
4095 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004096 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004097 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4098 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004099 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004100 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4101 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004102 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4103 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4104 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4105 // default.
4106 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4107 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4108 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4109 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004110 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4111 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004112 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004113 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004114 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4115 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4116 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4117 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004118 }
4119
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004120 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4121 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4122 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004123 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004124 Changed = true;
4125 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004126
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004127 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4128 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004129 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4130 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004131
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004132 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004133 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4134 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004135 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004136 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004137 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4138 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4139 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4140 TI->eraseFromParent();
4141 Changed = true;
4142 }
4143 } else {
4144 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004145 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004146 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4147 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004148 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004149 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4150 Changed = true;
4151 }
4152 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004153 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004154 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
4155 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004156 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004157 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4158 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004159 --i;
4160 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004161 Changed = true;
4162 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004163 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4164 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4165 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4166 Changed = true;
4167 }
4168 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4169 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4170 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4171 Changed = true;
4172 continue;
4173 }
4174
4175 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4176 E = CSI->handler_end();
4177 I != E; ++I) {
4178 if (*I == BB) {
4179 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4180 --I;
4181 --E;
4182 Changed = true;
4183 }
4184 }
4185 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4186 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4187 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4188 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4189 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4190 } else {
4191 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4192 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4193 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4194 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4195 }
4196 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4197 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4198 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4199 Changed = true;
4200 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004201 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004202 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4203 TI->eraseFromParent();
4204 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004205 }
4206 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004207
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004208 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004209 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004210 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4211 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004212 if (LoopHeaders)
4213 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004214 return true;
4215 }
4216
4217 return Changed;
4218}
4219
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004220static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4221 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4222
4223 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4224 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4225 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4226 return false;
4227 }
4228 return true;
4229}
4230
4231/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4232/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004233static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004234 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004235
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004236 bool HasDefault =
4237 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004238
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004239 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4240 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4241 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004242 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4243 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004244
4245 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
4246 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004247 if (!DestA)
4248 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004249 if (Dest == DestA) {
4250 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4251 continue;
4252 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004253 if (!DestB)
4254 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004255 if (Dest == DestB) {
4256 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4257 continue;
4258 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004259 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004260 }
4261
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004262 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4263 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004264 assert(DestA != DestB);
4265 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4266 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4267 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4268
4269 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4270 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4271 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4272 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4273 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4274 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4275 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4276 OtherDest = DestB;
4277 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4278 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4279 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4280 OtherDest = DestA;
4281 } else
4282 return false;
4283
4284 // Start building the compare and branch.
4285
4286 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004287 Constant *NumCases =
4288 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004289
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004290 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4291 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004292 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4293
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004294 Value *Cmp;
4295 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004296 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004297 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4298 else
4299 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004300 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004301
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004302 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004303 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4304 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004305 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4306 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004307 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4308 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4309 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4310 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4311 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4312 else
4313 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4314 }
4315 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4316 TrueWeight /= 2;
4317 FalseWeight /= 2;
4318 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004319 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004320 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4321 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4322 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004323 }
4324 }
4325
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004326 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4327 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4328 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004329 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4330 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004331 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004332 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4333 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004334 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4335 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004336 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4337 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004338 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4339 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4340 }
4341
4342 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004343 SI->eraseFromParent();
4344
4345 return true;
4346}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004347
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004348/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004349/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004350static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
4351 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004352 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004353 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004354 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004355 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004356
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004357 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4358 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4359 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004360 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004361 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4362
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004363 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004364 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004365 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004366 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4367 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4368 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004369 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004370 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004371 }
4372 }
4373
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004374 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4375 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004376 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4377 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004378 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004379 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4380 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4381 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004382 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004383 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004384 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004385 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004386 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004387 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4388 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004389 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4390 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004391 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4392 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4393 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4394 return true;
4395 }
4396
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004397 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4398 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4399 if (HasWeight) {
4400 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4401 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4402 }
4403
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004404 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004405 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4406 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004407 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004408 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004409 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004410 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004411 Weights.pop_back();
4412 }
4413
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004414 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004415 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004416 SI->removeCase(Case);
4417 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004418 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004419 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4420 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004421 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4422 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004423 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004424
4425 return !DeadCases.empty();
4426}
4427
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004428/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4429/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004430/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4431/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4432/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4433static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004434 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004435 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004436 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004437 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004438 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004439
4440 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4441 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004442 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004443
4444 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4445
4446 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4447 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4448 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4449 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4450
4451 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004452 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4453 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004454
4455 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4456 return PHI;
4457 }
4458
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004459 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004460}
4461
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004462/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4463/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4464/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004465/// Returns true if a change is made.
4466static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004467 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004468 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4469
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004470 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4471 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004472 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4473 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004474
4475 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004476 PHINode *PHI =
4477 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4478 if (!PHI)
4479 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004480
4481 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4482 }
4483
4484 bool Changed = false;
4485
4486 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004487 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4488 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004489 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004490 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004491
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004492 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4493 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004494
4495 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4496 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4497 Changed = true;
4498 }
4499
4500 return Changed;
4501}
4502
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004503/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004504/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004505static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004506 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4507 return false;
4508 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4509 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004510
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004511 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4512 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4513 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4514 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004515
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004516 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004517 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4518 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004519 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4520 return false;
4521 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004522
4523 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4524 return false;
4525
4526 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004527}
4528
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004529/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004530/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004531static Constant *
4532LookupConstant(Value *V,
4533 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004534 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4535 return C;
4536 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4537}
4538
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004539/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004540/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4541/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004542/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004543static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004544ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4545 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004546 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004547 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4548 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004549 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004550 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4551 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4552 if (A->isNullValue())
4553 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004554 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004555 }
4556
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004557 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4558 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4559 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4560 COps.push_back(A);
4561 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004562 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004563 }
4564
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004565 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004566 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4567 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004568 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004569
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004570 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004571}
4572
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004573/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004574/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004575/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004576/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004577static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004578GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004579 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004580 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004581 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004582 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4583 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4584
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004585 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4586 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004587 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004588 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4589 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4590 ++I) {
4591 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4592 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004593 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004594 return false;
4595 Pred = CaseDest;
4596 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4597 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4598 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4599 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004600 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004601 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004602
4603 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4604 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4605 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4606 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4607 User *User = Use.getUser();
4608 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4609 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4610 continue;
4611 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4612 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4613 continue;
4614 return false;
4615 }
4616
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004617 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004618 } else {
4619 break;
4620 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004621 }
4622
4623 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4624 if (!*CommonDest)
4625 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4626 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4627 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4628 return false;
4629
4630 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4631 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4632 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4633 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4634 if (Idx == -1)
4635 continue;
4636
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004637 Constant *ConstVal =
4638 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004639 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004640 return false;
4641
4642 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004643 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004644 return false;
4645
4646 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4647 }
4648
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004649 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004650}
4651
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004652// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4653// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004654static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004655 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4656 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004657 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4658 if (I.first == Result) {
4659 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4660 return;
4661 }
4662 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004663 UniqueResults.push_back(
4664 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004665}
4666
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004667// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004668// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4669// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4670// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004671static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4672 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4673 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4674 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004675 const DataLayout &DL,
4676 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004677 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4678 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4679
4680 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4681 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4682 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004683 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004684 return false;
4685
4686 // Only one value per case is permitted
4687 if (Results.size() > 1)
4688 return false;
4689 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4690
4691 // Check the PHI consistency.
4692 if (!PHI)
4693 PHI = Results[0].first;
4694 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4695 return false;
4696 }
4697 // Find the default result value.
4698 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4699 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4700 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004701 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004702 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4703 // is unreachable.
4704 DefaultResult =
4705 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4706 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004707 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004708 return false;
4709
4710 return true;
4711}
4712
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004713// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4714// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004715// Example:
4716// switch (a) {
4717// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4718// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4719// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4720// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4721// default:
4722// return 4;
4723// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004724static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4725 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4726 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004727 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004728 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004729 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4730 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4731 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4732 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4733 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4734 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4735
4736 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4737 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4738 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4739 Value *const ValueCompare =
4740 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4741 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4742 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4743 }
4744 Value *const ValueCompare =
4745 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004746 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4747 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004748 }
4749
4750 return nullptr;
4751}
4752
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004753// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4754// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004755static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4756 Value *SelectValue,
4757 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4758 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4759 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4760 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4761 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4762
4763 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4764
4765 // Remove the switch.
4766 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4767 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4768
4769 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4770 continue;
4771 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4772 }
4773 SI->eraseFromParent();
4774}
4775
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004776/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004777/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4778/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4779static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004780 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004781 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004782 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4783 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4784 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4785 Constant *DefaultResult;
4786 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4787 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004788 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004789 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004790 return false;
4791 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4792 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4793 return false;
4794 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4795
4796 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004797 Value *SelectValue =
4798 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004799 if (SelectValue) {
4800 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4801 return true;
4802 }
4803 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4804 return false;
4805}
4806
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004807namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004808
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004809/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4810class SwitchLookupTable {
4811public:
4812 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4813 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4814 SwitchLookupTable(
4815 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4816 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4817 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004818
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004819 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4820 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4821 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004822
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004823 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4824 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4825 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4826 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004827
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004828private:
4829 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4830 // different ways.
4831 enum {
4832 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4833 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4834 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004835
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004836 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4837 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4838 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4839 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004840
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004841 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4842 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4843 // shift and mask operations.
4844 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004845
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004846 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4847 // instructions from the table.
4848 ArrayKind
4849 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004850
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004851 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4852 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004853
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004854 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4855 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4856 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004857
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004858 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4859 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4860 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004861
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004862 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4863 GlobalVariable *Array;
4864};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004865
4866} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004867
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004868SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4869 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4870 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4871 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004872 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004873 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004874 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4875 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004876
4877 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004878 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004879
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004880 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4881
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004882 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004883 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004884 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4885 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4886 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004887 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004888
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004889 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004890 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4891
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004892 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004893 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004894 }
4895
4896 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004897 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004898 assert(DefaultValue &&
4899 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004900 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004901 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4902 if (!TableContents[I])
4903 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004904 }
4905
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004906 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004907 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004908 }
4909
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004910 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4911 // that single value.
4912 if (SingleValue) {
4913 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4914 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004915 }
4916
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004917 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4918 // table index.
4919 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4920 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4921 APInt PrevVal;
4922 APInt DistToPrev;
4923 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4924 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4925 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4926 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4927 if (!ConstVal) {
4928 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4929 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4930 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4931 break;
4932 }
4933 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4934 if (I != 0) {
4935 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4936 if (I == 1) {
4937 DistToPrev = Dist;
4938 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4939 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4940 break;
4941 }
4942 }
4943 PrevVal = Val;
4944 }
4945 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4946 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4947 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4948 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4949 ++NumLinearMaps;
4950 return;
4951 }
4952 }
4953
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004954 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004955 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004956 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004957 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4958 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4959 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004960 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4961 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4962 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4963 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4964 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004965 }
4966 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4967 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4968 Kind = BitMapKind;
4969 ++NumBitMaps;
4970 return;
4971 }
4972
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004973 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004974 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004975 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4976
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004977 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4978 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004979 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004980 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004981 Kind = ArrayKind;
4982}
4983
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004984Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004985 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004986 case SingleValueKind:
4987 return SingleValue;
4988 case LinearMapKind: {
4989 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4990 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4991 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4992 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4993 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4994 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4995 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4996 return Result;
4997 }
4998 case BitMapKind: {
4999 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5000 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005001
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005002 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5003 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5004 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5005 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005006
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005007 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5008 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5009 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5010 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005011
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005012 // Shift down.
5013 Value *DownShifted =
5014 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5015 // Mask off.
5016 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5017 }
5018 case ArrayKind: {
5019 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5020 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5021 uint64_t TableSize =
5022 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5023 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5024 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5025 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5026 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005027
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005028 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5029 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5030 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5031 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5032 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005033 }
5034 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5035}
5036
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005037bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005038 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005039 Type *ElementType) {
5040 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005041 if (!IT)
5042 return false;
5043 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5044 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005045
5046 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005047 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005048 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005049 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005050}
5051
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005052/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5053/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005054static bool
5055ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5056 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5057 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005058 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5059 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005060
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005061 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005062 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005063 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5064 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005065
5066 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005067 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005068
5069 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005070 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5071 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5072 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005073
5074 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5075 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5076 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5077 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005078 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005079 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005080
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005081 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5082 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5083 return true;
5084
5085 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5086 if (HasIllegalType)
5087 return false;
5088
5089 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5090 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5091 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5092 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005093}
5094
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005095/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5096/// \code
5097/// if (idx < tablesize)
5098/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5099/// else
5100/// r = default_value;
5101/// if (r != default_value)
5102/// ...
5103/// \endcode
5104/// Is optimized to:
5105/// \code
5106/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5107/// if (cond)
5108/// r = table[idx];
5109/// else
5110/// r = default_value;
5111/// if (cond)
5112/// ...
5113/// \endcode
5114/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005115static void reuseTableCompare(
5116 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5117 Constant *DefaultValue,
5118 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005119
5120 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5121 if (!CmpInst)
5122 return;
5123
5124 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5125 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5126 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5127 return;
5128
5129 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5130 if (!CmpOp1)
5131 return;
5132
5133 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5134 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5135 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5136
5137 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5138 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5139 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5140 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5141 return;
5142
5143 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5144 // compare result.
5145 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5146 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005147 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005148 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
5149 return;
5150 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5151 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5152 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005153
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005154 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5155 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5156 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5157 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5158 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5159 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5160 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5161 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5162 return;
5163 }
5164
5165 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5166 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5167 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5168 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5169 } else {
5170 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005171 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5172 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5173 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005174 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5175 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5176 }
5177}
5178
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005179/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5180/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5181/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005182static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5183 const DataLayout &DL,
5184 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005185 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005186
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00005187 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005188 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005189 return false;
5190
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005191 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5192 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5193
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005194 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5195 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5196 // string and lookup indices into that.
5197
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005198 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
5199 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005200 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
5201 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005202 return false;
5203
5204 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005205 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005206 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5207 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
5208 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5209 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5210
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005211 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005212 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
5213 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
5214 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5215 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5216 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005217
5218 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
5219 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5220 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5221 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5222 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5223 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5224
5225 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005226 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005227 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00005228 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005229 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005230 return false;
5231
5232 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005233 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5234 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5235 Constant *Value = I.second;
5236 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5237 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5238 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005239 }
5240 }
5241
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005242 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005243 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005244 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5245 }
5246
5247 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5248 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5249 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5250 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5251
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005252 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5253 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005254 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005255 bool HasDefaultResults =
5256 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5257 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005258
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005259 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5260 if (NeedMask) {
5261 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005262 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005263 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005264 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005265 return false;
5266 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005267
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005268 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5269 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5270 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005271 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005272 }
5273
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005274 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005275 return false;
5276
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005277 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005278 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005279 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5280 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005281
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005282 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005283 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005284 Value *TableIndex =
5285 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005286
5287 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5288 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005289 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005290 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005291 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5292 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5293 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5294
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005295 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5296 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5297 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5298 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5299 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5300 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005301 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5302
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005303 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005304 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005305 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5306 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005307 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005308 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5309 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5310 RangeCheckBranch =
5311 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005312 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005313
5314 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5315 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005316
5317 if (NeedMask) {
5318 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5319 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5320 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5321 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5322 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005323 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5324 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005325
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005326 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5327 // unnecessary illegal types.
5328 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5329 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5330 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005331 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005332 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5333 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005334 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5335 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005336 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5337 }
5338 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5339
5340 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5341 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5342 // else continue with table lookup.
5343 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005344 Value *MaskIndex =
5345 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5346 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5347 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5348 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005349 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5350
5351 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5352 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5353 }
5354
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005355 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5356 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5357 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5358 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5359 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5360 }
5361
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005362 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005363 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5364 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005365 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005366
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005367 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5368 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005369 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005370
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005371 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005372
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005373 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5374 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005375 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5376 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005377 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5378 ReturnedEarly = true;
5379 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005380 }
5381
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005382 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5383 // possible.
5384 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5385 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5386 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5387 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5388 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5389 }
5390 }
5391
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005392 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005393 }
5394
5395 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5396 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5397
5398 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005399 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005400 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005401
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005402 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005403 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005404 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5405 }
5406 SI->eraseFromParent();
5407
5408 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005409 if (NeedMask)
5410 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005411 return true;
5412}
5413
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005414static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5415 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5416 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5417 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5418 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5419 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5420 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005421
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005422 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5423}
5424
5425// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5426// of cases.
5427//
5428// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5429// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5430//
5431// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5432// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5433static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5434 const DataLayout &DL,
5435 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5436 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5437 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5438 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5439 return false;
5440 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5441 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5442 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5443 return false;
5444
5445 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5446 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5447 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5448 // as signed.
5449 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5450 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5451 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5452 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5453
5454 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5455 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5456 return false;
5457
5458 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5459 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5460 for (auto &V : Values)
5461 V -= Base;
5462
5463 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5464 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5465 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5466 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5467 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005468 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005469
5470 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5471 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5472 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5473 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5474 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5475 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5476 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5477 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005478 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005479 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5480 return false;
5481
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005482 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005483 for (auto &V : Values)
5484 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5485
5486 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5487 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5488 return false;
5489
5490 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5491 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5492 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5493 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5494 //
5495 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5496 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5497 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5498 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005499
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005500 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5501 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5502 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5503 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005504 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5505 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5506 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005507 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5508
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005509 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5510 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005511 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5512 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005513 C.setValue(
5514 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005515 }
5516 return true;
5517}
5518
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005519bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005520 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5521
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005522 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5523 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5524 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5525 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5526 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005527 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005528
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005529 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5530 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5531 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005532 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005533
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005534 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5535 // away into any preds.
5536 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5537 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5538 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5539 ++BBI;
5540 if (SI == &*BBI)
5541 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005542 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005543 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005544
5545 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005546 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005547 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005548
5549 // Remove unreachable cases.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005550 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5551 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005552
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005553 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL, TTI))
5554 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005555
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005556 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005557 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005558
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005559 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005560 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005561
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005562 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005563 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005564
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005565 return false;
5566}
5567
5568bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5569 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5570 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005571
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005572 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5573 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5574 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5575 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005576 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005577 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5578 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005579 --i;
5580 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005581 Changed = true;
5582 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005583 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005584
5585 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5586 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5587 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5588 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5589 return true;
5590 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005591
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005592 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5593 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5594 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5595 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5596 return true;
5597 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005598
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005599 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5600 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005601 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005602 }
5603 return Changed;
5604}
5605
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005606/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5607/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5608/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5609/// a shared handler.
5610///
5611/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5612/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5613/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5614/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5615/// sinking in this file)
5616///
5617/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5618/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5619/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5620/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5621/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5622/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5623///
5624/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5625/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5626/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5627static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5628 BasicBlock *BB) {
5629 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5630 assert(Succ);
5631 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5632 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5633 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5634 return false;
5635
5636 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5637 if (BB == OtherPred)
5638 continue;
5639 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5640 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5641 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5642 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005643 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5644 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005645 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5646 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5647 continue;
5648
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005649 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005650 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5651 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5652 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5653 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5654 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005655 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5656 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005657 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5658 }
5659
5660 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5661 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005662 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5663 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5664 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005665 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5666 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5667 }
5668
5669 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5670 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5671 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5672 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5673 }
5674
5675 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5676 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5677 BI->eraseFromParent();
5678 return true;
5679 }
5680 return false;
5681}
5682
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005683bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5684 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005685 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005686
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005687 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5688 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005689
5690 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5691 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005692 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5693 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5694 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5695 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005696 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005697 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005698 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005699 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5700 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005701
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005702 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5703 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5704 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5705 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5706 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5707 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005708 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005709 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005710 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005711 return true;
5712 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005713
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005714 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5715 // equivalent.
5716 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005717 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5718 }
5719 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005720 return true;
5721 }
5722
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005723 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5724 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5725 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5726 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005727 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005728 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005729 return false;
5730}
5731
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005732static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5733 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5734 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5735 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5736 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5737 return nullptr;
5738 PredPred = PPred;
5739 }
5740 return PredPred;
5741}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005742
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005743bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005744 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005745
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005746 // Conditional branch
5747 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5748 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5749 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5750 // switch.
5751 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005752 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005753 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005754
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005755 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5756 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5757 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5758 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5759 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5760 ++I;
5761 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005762 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005763 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005764 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005765 ++I;
5766 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5767 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5768 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005769 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005770 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005771 }
5772 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005773
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005774 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005775 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005776 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005777
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005778 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5779 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5780 // of the BI branch.
5781 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5782 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5783 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5784 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5785 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5786 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5787 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5788 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5789 if (Implication) {
5790 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5791 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5792 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5793 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5794 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5795 BI->setCondition(CI);
5796 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005797 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005798 }
5799 }
5800 }
5801
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005802 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5803 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5804 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005805 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005806 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005807
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005808 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5809 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5810 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5811 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005812 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5813 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005814 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005815 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005816 } else {
5817 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005818 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005819 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5820 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5821 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005822 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005823 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005824 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005825 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005826 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005827 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005828 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5829 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5830 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005831 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005832 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005833 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005834
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005835 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5836 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5837 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5838 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005839 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005840 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005841
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005842 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005843 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5844 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005845 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005846 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005847 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005848
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005849 // Look for diamond patterns.
5850 if (MergeCondStores)
5851 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5852 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5853 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5854 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005855 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005856
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005857 return false;
5858}
5859
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005860/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5861static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5862 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5863 if (!C)
5864 return false;
5865
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005866 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005867 return false;
5868
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005869 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005870 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005871 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005872
5873 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5874 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005875 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5876 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5877 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5878 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005879 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005880 return false;
5881
5882 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5883 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5884 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5885 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5886
5887 // Look through bitcasts.
5888 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5889 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5890
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005891 // Load from null is undefined.
5892 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005893 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5894 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005895
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005896 // Store to null is undefined.
5897 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005898 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005899 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5900 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005901
5902 // A call to null is undefined.
5903 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5904 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005905 }
5906 return false;
5907}
5908
5909/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005910/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005911static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5912 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5913 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5914 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5915 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5916 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5917 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5918 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5919 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5920 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5921 // destination from conditional branches.
5922 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5923 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5924 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005925 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5926 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005927 BI->eraseFromParent();
5928 return true;
5929 }
5930 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5931 }
5932
5933 return false;
5934}
5935
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005936bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005937 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005938
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005939 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005940 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005941
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005942 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5943 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005944 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005945 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005946 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5947 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5948 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005949 }
5950
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005951 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5952 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005953 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005954
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005955 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5956 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5957
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005958 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5959 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5960
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005961 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5962 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5963 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5964 //
5965 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5966 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005967
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005968 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5969
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005970 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5971 // eliminate it, do so now.
5972 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5973 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005974 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005975
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005976 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005977 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005978 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005979 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5980 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005981 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005982 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5983 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005984 }
5985 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005986 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5987 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005988 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005989 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5990 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005991 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005992 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5993 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5994 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005995 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005996 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5997 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005998 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005999 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
6000 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6001 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006002 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006003 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
6004 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6005 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006006 }
6007
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006008 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006009}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006010
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00006011/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
6012/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006013/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
6014/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
6015///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00006016bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00006017 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00006018 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006019 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00006020 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006021 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006022}